Craftsman 247.28933 Lawn Mower User Manual

RO
NIT
2009
OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
INTRODUCTION 5
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
1
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Express Down Window Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . 23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 39
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 43
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . . 44
▫ Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . 47
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 75
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your vehicle are double-sided. You can
insert the keys into the locks with either side up.
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give
you the number. The key code can also be obtained by an
authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
• Place the shift lever in PARK.
• Push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate
the key to the LOCK position.
• Remove the key.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — Lock
2 — Acc
3 — On
4 — Start
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keys威,
or any other transponder-equipped components on
the same key chain will not cause a key-related
(transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when
starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other
Radio Frequency (RF) electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors, liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation.
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, the system
provides both audible and visual signals. The horn will
sound repeatedly for three minutes, while the headlights
and taillights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm the System:
Remove the keys from the ignition switch and exit
vehicle. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing
power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Close all
doors.
the
the
the
the
The Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument
cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal
that the system is arming. During this 16 second pre-arm
period, opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the
arming process. If the system arms successfully, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate the alarm is set. Manually locking the doors with
the door lock plunger (located on the inside of the doors)
or the driver’s door key lock cylinder will not arm the
system.
To Disarm the System:
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If the previously
described arming sequence has occurred, the system will
arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the
vehicle. If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Manually unlocking the doors with the door lock plunger
(located on the inside of the doors) or the driver’s door
key lock cylinder will not disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door.
They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors
are closed then fade to off.
2
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
23 ft (7 m) using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Three Button RKE transmitter
NOTE:
• For the remote starting feature (if equipped), refer to
“Remote Starting System” in this section.
• Your vehicle’s RKE transmitter may have three or four
buttons depending on the optional features purchased
with your vehicle.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors and the liftgate. The parking lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first
press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to “Remote Key Unlock,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least four seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. If the ignition is OFF
when the doors are locked, the parking lights will flash
once and the horn will sound a single chirp.
Sound Horn with Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to “Sound Horn with Lock”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
• On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed (i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not
longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights with Lock
The feature will cause the parking lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
• On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to “Flash Lights with Lock,”
under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least four seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Express Down Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Using the Panic Alarm
NOTE: The PANIC and SECURITY alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the PANIC
and SECURITY modes to hear the differences in the horn.
If one should sound in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
To turn the PANIC alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the PANIC alarm is on, the
headlights and parking lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the illuminated entry system will
turn on.
The PANIC alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
During the PANIC mode, the door locks and RKE
systems will function normally. PANIC mode will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system on vehicles so
equipped.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming” in
this section.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter
case apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
5. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten until snug.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating Case Halves
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
To start your vehicle remotely, press and release the
REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice
within three seconds. To indicate that the vehicle is about
to start, the parking lights will flash and the horn will
sound briefly (if programmed).
1. Weak batteries in RKE transmitter. The expected life of
the batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system. This system allows the vehicle to be started from
distances up to 300 ft (91 m) using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, which is part of your ignition
key.
In order to start your vehicle remotely, the hood, liftgate,
and all of the doors must be closed.
Remote Start Button
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the engine starts it will run for 15 minutes. To
cancel remote start, press and release the REMOTE
START button once.
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Once the
vehicle is unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the
vehicle, insert the key in the ignition, and turn it to the
ON position. Otherwise, the system will cancel the
remote start and automatically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500.
• Any engine warning lamps come on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pressed.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK.
The vehicle can be started remotely a maximum of two
times consecutively. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start, where the remote start sequence
was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without
starting. Following either of these conditions, or if the
Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped) is sounding, or if the
PANIC button was pressed, the system must be reset
before remote starting the vehicle again. To reset the
system, insert a valid key into the ignition and turn it to
the ON position and then back to the LOCK position.
DOOR LOCKS
The vacuum fluorescent (VF) display, located in the
odometer area, displays the word DOOR as an indication
of a door ajar or door not completely closed. When the
vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not
completely closed, the VF display will show the word
DOOR.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
If any other active warnings including “GATE” or “GASCAP” are present, they will be shown in the VF display
and will also continue to cycle. If the vehicle is moving,
three single chimes will occur (one chime for each
complete display cycle, three cycles total). Afterward, the
display will continue to cycle only (no chimes).
2
If the TRIP/RESET button is pressed while the VF
warnings are being displayed, the VF display will revert
back to only displaying the odometer/trip odometer
mileage.
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Lock Plunger
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on each of the front door
panels. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition and either of the front doors is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate.
A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open as a reminder to remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The automatic door locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
1. The automatic door locks feature is enabled.
For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the
doors.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the automatic door locks feature in accordance with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The automatic unlock doors on exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The automatic unlock doors on exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock
the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
NOTE: Use the automatic unlock doors on exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
it to either the LOCK or UNLOCK positions.
Inserting Ignition Key
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger/rear passenger doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” in Section 4 of this
manual. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto Down Feature
The driver’s and front passenger’s (if equipped for passenger side) power window switches have an “Auto
Down” feature. Press the window switch past the first
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories
Until Exit” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
On some models, the driver’s power window switch has
an “Auto Up” feature. Pull the window switch up to the
second detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release when you want the
window to stop.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset
At some point in time, it may be necessary to reactivate
the auto-up feature. To do so, perform the following
procedure:
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door (below
the power window switches) allows you to disable the
window control on the other doors. To disable the
window controls on the other doors, press the window
LOCKOUT button. To enable the window controls, press
the window LOCKOUT button a second time.
1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The vacuum fluorescent (VF) display located in the
odometer area displays the word “GATE” as an indication of when the liftgate is not completely closed. When
the vehicle is not moving, and the liftgate is not completely closed, the VF display will show the word
“GATE”. On EVIC equipped vehicles, “GATE AJAR” will
be displayed.
If any other active warnings are present, they will be
shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle.
If the vehicle is moving, three single chimes will sound if
the rear liftgate is open (one chime for each complete
display cycle). After this, the VF display will continue to
sequence only (no chimes).
If the trip/reset button is pressed while the VF warnings
are being displayed, the VF display will revert back to
only displaying the odometer/trip odometer mileage.
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and right front passenger, and
side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated
next to a window. If you will be carrying children too
small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used
to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe also.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision it
could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If
you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS
on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
2
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center
seating position. Children 12 years old and younger
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever
possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is
buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will
be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver seat belt at least three times,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. The manufacturer does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威).
4. Turn OFF the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the
programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
fasten the driver seat belt.
2. Start the engine, and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
Light to turn off.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat
belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger side airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. They are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
2
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the window bag.
The area where the window bag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
Window Airbag Location
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during
inflation.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity. Along with the seat belts,
the front airbags provide improved protection for the
driver and front passenger. Window bags also work with
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
⬙child⬙ size category. This could be a child, teenager, or
even a adult.
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side and rollover collisions. In certain types of collisions, both the front and
side airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions
where the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep
you in the right position for the airbags to protect you
properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See “Child Restraint” in this section.
1. Children 12 years and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
customer center. Phone numbers are provided under “If
You Need Assistance” in Section 9.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• The side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Control Module
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Front Remote Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Retractors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Passenger Seat Only
− Occupant Classification Module
− Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
− Weight Sensors
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) module determines if a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front
airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates
of airbag inflation from direction provided by the
ORC. The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation
based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant
Classification module. The ORC will detect roll over,
but not rear impacts.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the instrument panel, and
the steering wheel and column. If the key is in the
LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
• Also, the ORC turns on the “Airbag Warning Light” and “PAD Indicator Light” for six
to eight seconds for a self-check when the
ignition is first turned ON. After the selfcheck, the “Airbag Warning Light” will turn off. The
“PAD Indicator Light” will function normally (Refer to
⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in
this section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the “Airbag Warning
Light” either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound if the light comes on again after
initial start up.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the “Airbag Warning Light” in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified
in a category other than an adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
restraint.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The “PAD Indicator Light” illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG
OFF⬙ to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger airbag
will not inflate even though the “PAD Indicator Light”
is not illuminated.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The “PAD Indicator Light” should not be illuminated
when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front
passenger seat. In this case, the airbag is ready to be
inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
Indicator Light Location
For occupants classified in the “child” size category, the
“PAD Indicator Light” will be illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not
inflate. If the “PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated,
DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off. Move the child
restraint to the rear seat. A deploying passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear
facing infant seat.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System, children 12 years and
younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in
an appropriate child restraint.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Airbag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
OFF
Airbag Status
Adult
ON
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other RelaON
OFF
tively Light Objects
Empty or Very
OFF*
OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on
the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult will
cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case, the
OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult. An
adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position (with their
feet on or near the floor) in order to be properly classified.
Reclining the seat back too far may change how an
occupant is classified by the OCS.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the
“PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle
(like the door or instrument panel), the weight sensors in
the seat may not properly classify the occupant. Objects
lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center
console can prevent the occupant’s weight from being
measured properly and may result in the occupant being
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger
seatback does not touch anything placed on the back seat
because this can also affect occupant classification. Also,
if you fold down the rear seat, check to be sure it doesn’t
touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the “Airbag Warning
Light” (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on. This
indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. The “Airbag Warning Light” is turned on whenever
there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag
system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the “PAD
Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning Light” are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until
the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged under the seat and
interferes with operation of the weight sensors, a fault will
occur which turns on both the “PAD Indicator Light” and
the “Airbag Warning Light.” Once the lodged object is
removed, the fault will be automatically cleared after a short
period of time.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the
front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible
based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the
bags inflate to their full size. The bags fully inflate in
about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time
it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) module. The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag
should be turned off. It also determines the rate of
airbag inflation during a collision.
• Your vehicle has four weight sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions and
rollover events. When the ORC detects a collision
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity
of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain airbag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by Chrysler LLC/Mopar威.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrysler LLC/Mopar威.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) module detects a
moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, and seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Also, have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well.
• Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlocks the doors automatically.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment
with the vehicle stopped, the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following functions:
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Flashes hazard lights.
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure.
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on
video players on the right front passenger seatback. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant. This could
allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when
it is not desired.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for
your protection in an impact. The airbag system is designed
to be maintenance free. If any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• Does not come on during the six to eight seconds after
the ignition switch is first turned ON.
• Remains on after the six to eight second interval.
• Comes on for any period of time while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor
detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a
crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that may be recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seat belt status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child. Use
the restraint that is correct for your child:
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can become
so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used: rearward-facing infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable safety
standards. The manufacturer also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with “automatic
locking retractors identified by a distinctive label.”
The second row center position has a cinching latch
plate identified by a distinctive label. Both types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt (the cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight). However, any seat
belt system may loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. For the
second row seat belts with the automatic locking
retractors, pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough to allow it to pass through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor. Allow
the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child
restraint. For additional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
to
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (refer to LATCH — Child Seat
Anchorage System in this section.)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having fixed lower attachments or flexible
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard seating positions only. The center seating position
will accommodate LATCH-compatible lower anchorages
with flexible webbing mounted attachments only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats
share a common lower anchorage.
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to the next section for
typical installation instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
2
Latch Anchorages
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. For the outboard seating
positions, route the tether underneath the head rest and
attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back
of the seat. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching
latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the
seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. However, any seat belt system may loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor, it will
have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow it to pass through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the belt until it is completely extracted from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling
on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about
the child restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
earlier in this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether under
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for a extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode
when driving with any windows open, even if only
slightly, to help keep fresh air circulating inside the
vehicle; otherwise, poisonous gases could be drawn
into the vehicle.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged i.e., (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on, and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check, when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the bulb is not lit during starting, have it
replaced. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the DEFROST mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking
for fuel, coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ UConnect威 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 84
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect威 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . 86
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 115
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Six-Way Driver’s Power Seat With Manual
Recliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights And
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ High Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 131
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 132
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 144
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 135
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 148
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . 137
▫ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Enabling And Disabling The System . . . . . . . 140
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Opening Sunroof - Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . 151
3
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Front Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Closing Sunroof - Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Rear Cargo Slide Out System (Load N Go威)
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . 166
䡵 Roof Ditch Applique — Non Functional . . . . . . 166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door
trim panel.
3
Power Mirror Switch
Press the switch to the L (left) or R (right) to select a
mirror. Using one of the four arrows, move the mirror to
the desired position.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-Out” Feature
The sun visor “slide-on rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend.
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞) —
IF EQUIPPED
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)
system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect威 system operating instructions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located on the lower right
corner of the Radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect威 system.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for
supported phones.
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnect威 system is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
UConnect威 features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
UConnect威 works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long
as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system
pairing instructions:
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your UConnect威 system. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your UConnect威 system. The priority
allows the UConnect威 system to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
UConnect威 system will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the UConnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, UConnect威 automatically
downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
UConnect威 automatically downloads names (text names)
and number entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book Access
Profile may support this feature. See UConnect威 website
for supported phones.
• To call a name from downloaded (or UConnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the UConnect威, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the UConnect威.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the UConnect威. These can only be edited on
the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to UConnect威 on the next phone connection.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, UConnect威
allows the user to download entries from their phone via
Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the PHONE button
and say “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts,
“Ready to accept “V” card entry via Bluetooth威…” The
system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from
your phone using the Bluetooth威 Object Exchange Profile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owner’s Manual for
specific instructions on how to send these entries from
your phone.
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit UConnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete UConnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” UConnect威 Phonebook Entries
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
• The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this
section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect威 system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UConnect姞 System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”’, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect威 system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the UConnect威 system.
When calling a number with your UConnect威 system that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to
enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 #
Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed
by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and to
leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the UConnect威 system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dialing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect威 system:
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see
the next two sections for an alternate way to “select”
or “delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
System
UConnect威 Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
• Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and UConnect威 Local) name
recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect威 system.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and after the beep you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Commands
The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition system is speaking. Please note the volume setting
for VR is different then the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say “Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language English”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language French”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Spanish”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hardkey to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one
of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, say “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will
train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
SEATS
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
fully.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Manual Seat Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seat Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward, and release the lever.
3
Seatback Release Lever
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat
belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Six-Way Driver’s Power Seat with Manual
Recliner
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or
down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Power Seat Switches
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
the rear of the power seat switch. Pull up on the lever to
recline the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger seat can be folded flat to allow for
extended cargo space. Pull up on the lever to fold down
the seat back.
Fold Flat Passenger Seat
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head
restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as
high as practical. The head restraints have a locking
button that must be pushed inward to lower the head
restraint. The head restraints may be raised without
pushing in the button.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel.
After turning ON the ignition, Press the switch
once to select High level heating. Press the
switch a second time to select Low level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut Off the
heating elements. Amber indicators in the switch indicate
the level of heat in use. Two indicators will illuminate for
High, one for Low, and none for Off.
When High is selected, the heaters provide a boosted
heat level during the first four minutes of operation after
heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the
normal High setting. If High is selected, the system will
automatically switch to Low after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on Low also turns Off automatically after
30 minutes.
Heated Seat Switches
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
3
Rear Seat Release Strap
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
2. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle).
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Lower Rear Seat
1. Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of
each rear seatback.
Rear Seat Release Strap
3. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
4. If desired, push down on the seatback to lock it in the
folded position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
To Raise Rear Seat
If locked in the folded position, pull the release strap
(toward the front of the vehicle).
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, there are two latches that must be
released.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Hood Release Lever
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the safety latch lever to the right. It is located
between the grille and hood opening left of the center.
To prevent possible damage:
• Do not slam the hood to close it.
• Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
• Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip
before closing hood to prevent damage to grille.
WARNING!
Underhood Safety Latch
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
3
Multifunction Lever
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights and
Headlights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights. Turn to
the second detent for headlight operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or
down.
NOTE: If the driver’s door is left open, and the headlights or parking lights are left on, a chime will sound.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
High Beam Headlights
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beams. Pull the lever towards you
to switch the headlights back to low beams.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on at
high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is in the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking or Low beam headlights and pull out the
end of the lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on Low beam. Selecting High
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
NOTE: A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on
for more than 1 mile (2 km).
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the
vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft (1 m). They
will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the
headlights are switched on.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The overhead light comes on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position and the key is not
in the ignition. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the
overhead light operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
Move the lever upward to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation.
Daytime Brightness Feature
Certain instrument panel components (odometer, radio
display) can be illuminated at full brightness during the
daytime. This can be helpful when driving with your
headlights on during the daytime, such as in a parade or
a funeral procession. To activate this feature, rotate the
left stalk one detent lower than the dome light.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Move the lever to the delay
position, then select the delay interval by turning the end
of the lever. The delay can be regulated from a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle
every second, if the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h). If the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles, to a cycle
every two seconds.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for as long as the lever is held, plus two wipe
cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever under the
multifunction lever and move the wheel up or down as
desired. Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column
firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Control Handle
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you, “CANCEL”, or normal
brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed
memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning off the
ignition switch erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is on, speed can be
increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new speed will be set.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (6 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is on,
push down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed decreases.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be
reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control lever
ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set
speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Manual Transmission
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic
Speed Control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the
speed control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need
to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without
speed loss.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could
lose control. An accident could be the result. Don’t
use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for
obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible
and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the Rear Park Assist System operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the Rear Park Assist System.
• When you turn off the Rear Park Assist System, the
instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Furthermore, once you turn off the Rear
Park Assist System, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and the Rear Park Assist System is turned off,
a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and
the instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST
DISABLED.”
• The Rear Park Assist System, when on, will MUTE the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• If a Rear Park Assist System malfunction occurs, a
single chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” and the LED in the Rear Park Assist switch will
illuminate. If this occurs, see your authorized dealer
for service.
CAUTION!
• The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist System.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car
wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist System. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
Enabling and Disabling the System
There are times when you may want to disable the Rear
Park Assist System, such as when towing a trailer.
Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off
through the EVIC. For details, refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Vehicles Equipped with Rear Park Assist Switch
You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off by
pressing the Rear Park Assist switch located the lower
switch bank below the climate controls.
System Operation
The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from
the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located
above the rear window provides both visible and audible
warnings to indicate the range of the object.
Rear Park Assist Switch
Rear Park Assist LED Display
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
display above the rear window.
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, and the
system is enabled, the warning display will turn on all of
its LEDs for approximately one second. Then, the system
dimly illuminates the two inner most LEDs when it is
detecting no obstacles.
The Rear Park Assist System is active when the ignition is
in the ON position, and the system is enabled, and the
driver shifts the transmission into the REVERSE position,
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED
Inner LED
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
79 in (200 cm)
51 in (130 cm)
45 in (115 cm)
31.5 in (80 cm)
39 in (100 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
28 in (70 cm)
16 in (40 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
6 in (15 cm)
12 in (30 cm)
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Sounds for 1⁄2 second
None
None
None
None
None
Intermittent
Continuous
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
• After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with programming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
• Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with
the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Open. During Express Open
operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof - Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. During Express Close
operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
NOTE: To ensure the sunroof is fully closed, press and
hold the switch until the sunroof has completely stopped
moving.
Closing Sunroof - Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold. This allows the
sunroof to move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
This vehicle has two 12-Volt auxiliary power outlets that
can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters. The front power outlet, located in the lower portion
of the instrument panel, has a snap on plastic cap so that
it can be covered when not in use. As a safety precaution,
the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the
ignition switch ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter
heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adapter.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
(Continued)
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 110-Volt, 150-Watt power inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC
current to AC current. This outlet can be used to power
small appliances and electronics.
110-Volt AC (150-Watt maximum) power outlet
Press the switch located in the center stack lower switch
bank to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the switch
again to turn the power off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: When the inverter switch is pressed, there will
be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of
the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is
producing AC power.
Power Inverter Switch
NOTE: Due to built in overload protection; the inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
• Do not use a Three-Prong Adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
In the center console, there are two cupholders for the
front seat passengers.
The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the
center console.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
STORAGE
Front Storage Compartment
The front storage compartment (located on the left side of
the instrument panel) can hold cell phones, PDAs, and
other small items.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, press the latch and lift the cover.
3
Center Console
Front Storage Compartment
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console has a removable storage tray which
can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multifunction lever to the extreme top position.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
Removable Storage Tray
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
(Continued)
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side features a plastic lined tray which can hold a
variety of items. The maximum load capacity of the load
floor is 400 lbs (181 kg).
The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
procedure:
1. Push the side mounted release handles (toward the
center of the vehicle) to release cover.
Floor Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
2. Lift the cover.
3. Flip the cover over, and lock panel back into position.
Rear Cargo Slide Out System (Load N Go姞) — If
Equipped
The sliding cargo load floor (Load N Go威) slides back
and forth on steel tracks for convenience. The maximum
load capacity is 400 lbs (181 kg). The floor panel can stop
every 2 in (50 mm) when the handle is released to lock
the panel in position.
1. Open the tailgate.
Load Floor
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Squeeze the right hand release handle.
Sliding Panel
Release Handle
3. Pull out the sliding panel.
4. Squeeze the right hand release handle to slide the
panel back into the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary ring switch on the control lever (located on the
right side of the steering column), controls operation of
the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating the center of
the switch up to the ON position will activate the wiper.
Rotating the switch ring beyond the ON or OFF position
will activate the rear washer. The wash pump will
continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is
engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three times
before returning to the set position.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
off, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The pushbutton for the rear window defroster is
located on the mode knob of the climate control
switch bank. Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the electric remote control heated mirrors
(optional). An amber light shows that the defroster is on.
The defroster will automatically turn off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the switch again. To prevent excessive
battery drain, use the defroster only when the engine is
operating.
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe
distance from the window to prevent damaging the
heating elements.
ROOF DITCH APPLIQUE — NON FUNCTIONAL
The Roof Ditch Applique as provided on the vehicle is
non functional. Metal side rails and crossbars can be
purchased from Mopar威 accessories to proved a functional roof rack system.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: Metal rails/crossbars are offered by Mopar威
accessories. See your authorized dealer.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Compass And Trip Computer — If Equipped . . 187
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 201
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 209
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . . 219
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio
(RER/REN) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 227
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . . 228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 238
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 238
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only). . . . . 240
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode . . . . 242
䡵 Video Entertainment System™ (Sales Code
XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 - Air Outlet
2 - Instrument Cluster
6 - Glove Compartment
7 - Climate Control
3 - Storage Tray
4 - Center Air Outlet
5 - Radio
8 - Heated Seat Switch *
9 - Rear Park Assist Switch *
10 - Passenger Airbag Disable Light
11 - Hazard Warning Flasher
12 - Electronic Stability Control / Traction
Control Switch *
13 - Cigar Lighter / Power Outlet
14 - Storage Bin
* If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition
switch is in the ON position.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel cap is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
5. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in Section 2 for more information.
6. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H ,
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime
will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H , the
indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime
will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
for more information.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Speedometer
Shows the vehicles speed.
8. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the headlights are on
high beam. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
9. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning Light /
Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light – If Equipped
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: The ESP Control System will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is actively operating.
11. TOW/HAUL Indicator — If Equipped
The TOW/HAUL button is located on the gear
shift bezel. This light will illuminate when the
TOW/HAUL button has been selected.
12. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
13. Transmission Temperature Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
14. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key
when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle
will usually be drivable, however, see an authorized dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when
the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
16. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP) /
Traction Control System (TCS) indicator light in
the speedometer area illuminates with the key in
the ignition switch turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. The ⬙ESP/
TCS Indicator Light⬙ starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESP system becomes active. The ⬙ESP/TCS
Indicator Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
becomes illuminated when the ESP Off button has been
pressed or ESP is only partially available, caused by lack of
engine management or brake thermal model.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
18. SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator — If Equipped
The “SERV 4WD Indicator Light” will come on
when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position and will stay on for two seconds. If the
light stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
19. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the fog lights are On.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
21. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
22. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for seven
seconds as a bulb check, when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
23. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
24. Shift Lever Indicator
The electronic shift lever display is self-contained within
the instrument cluster. It displays the position of the
automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of
each position to all other positions. The display will place
a box around the selected transmission range (PRND21).
If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no
boxes) have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
The TRIP ODOMETER shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button. To
reset the TRIP ODOMETER, press and hold the button
while in trip mode, until the TRIP ODOMETER resets.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
ESPOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Deactivated
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center Display Area located in the instrument cluster.
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped” in this section, for more information.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
Change Oil Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless
reset, this message will continue to display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, press and release the TRIP
ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious
conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
28. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
29. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. When the trip
odometer is displayed, press once for Trip A, and press
again for Trip B. If the instrument cluster is a base cluster
(no separate compass/temperature display), press the
button a third time for outside ambient temperature on
the odometer display. Press and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles (0 km). The
odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
Press this button to view the compass display (if
equipped). Refer to “Compass/Trip Computer” in this
section.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
30. Compass/Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Compass/Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) messages.
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). It is
located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel
and engine temperature gauge, and the tachometer.
4
Compass/Trip Computer Display
The compass/trip computer, when the appropriate conditions exist, will show the following messages in the
odometer display:
• Door Ajar (door)
• Lift Gate Ajar (gATE)
• Loose Fuel Cap (gASCAP)
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right button (on the instrument cluster).
Control Buttons
Press and release the odometer/trip odometer reset button (right side of the instrument cluster) to access the
compass/trip computer displays.
Trip Conditions
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B.
Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
Display Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as IPODs, Cell Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
To Set the Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC
reset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the proper zone is selected.
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approximately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is displayed.
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
• Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• Navigation system screens (if equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Audio mode display
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status, Personal Settings.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. Also, the FUNCTION SELECT button changes the current CD track being played
(if so equipped) when the EVIC is in the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features).
Press
and
release
the
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
• Turn signal on (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left front turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• Left ear turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• Right front turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• Right rear turn signal light out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal settings not available – vehicle not in PARK
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
• Left/right front door ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph/1 km/h)
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5.
• Left/right rear door ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph/1 km/h)
• Check gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5).
• Door(s) ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Liftgate ajar (with a single chime)
• Left front low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5.
• Left rear low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5.
• Right front low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5.
• Right rear low pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5.
• Oil change required (with a single chime).
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message
will continue to display each time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine).
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the trip
computer functions.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following trip functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average fuel economy
• Distance to empty
• Elapsed time
• Display units of measure in
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW
FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function. (Reset ALL will display during this three second
window).
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the calibration mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The CAL indicator will be displayed
in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. For the most accurate compass performance,
the compass variance must be set using the following
procedure:
4
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until the “Compass Variance” message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
select English, Espanol, or Francais. As you continue, the
information will display in the selected language.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the flash lights on
lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF
appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec,” “5 min,” or “10 min” appears.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Display Units of Measure in
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or
METRIC appears.
REQ Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Program Type
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
16-Digit Character
Display
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
NOTE:
• The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
• These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
MPEG
Specification
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
WMA
Specification
WMA
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO
(RER/REN) – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,
CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive
(HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in
(16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation
(RER) user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) — If Equipped
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Global Positioning System (GPS) — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate, once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the On/Volume control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Program Type
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
16-Digit Character
Display
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the
SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats. Press the release button and lower the screen.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
4
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™ (SALES
CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Overhead Display Screen
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES™ Remote Control Location
Remote Sound System Controls
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right-hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
Radio Operation
Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next
listenable station. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK
down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbuttons.
CD Player
Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on
the CD. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the
beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the
previous track, if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch changes
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
The instrument panel features four airflow registers. Two
registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument
panel and two are located in the center of the instrument
panel. These registers can be fully closed to partially
block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct airflow
where you desire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you turn the outer
control ring to the right from the OFF
position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either a
primary mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of these
modes. The closer the control is to a
particular mode, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the four outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
air flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature (Hot) settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even
if the fan switch is not in the A/C position. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Press the mode control knob to activate the
recirculation mode. A lamp in the knob will
illuminate when you are in recirculate mode.
Press the knob again to deactivate the system.
Only use the recirculation mode to temporarily block out
any outside odors, smoke, or dust and to cool the interior
rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of
moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation mode will not operate in FLOOR,
MIX or DEFROST modes.
Air Conditioning Operation
Press the temperature control knob to activate the
air conditioning mode. A lamp will illuminate
when the air conditioning system is engaged.
Press the knob again to deactivate the system.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning on the air conditioning (pressing the “Snowflake” button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature
control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain
comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
DEFROST mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminants (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminants increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50%
concentration is recommended. Refer to Fluids and
Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
–29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 263
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ 4–Speed Automatic Transmission (3.7L
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ 5–Speed Automatic Transmission (4.0L
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . 275
▫ MP 143 Single-Speed Part-Time
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ When To Use 4L Or 4LO (Low) Range . . . . . . 278
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 301
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 316
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . 308
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 308
▫ 3.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ 4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 328
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 333
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Towing — 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Towing — 4WD Or All-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails to Start
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 of
this manual for proper jump starting procedures
and follow them carefully.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme
Cold Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
5
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0 °F (-18 °C) are
expected to last for several days.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded three-wire extension cord.
• The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
REVERSE. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. Always depress the brake pedal first, before
moving the shift lever out of PARK.
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed. To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover which is located on the
PRNDL bezel.
4. Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
Interlock Manual Override
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
4–Speed Automatic Transmission (3.7L Engine)
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
when moving the shift lever between these gears.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brake
first, then place the shift lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
NEUTRAL
Move the shift lever into this gear only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. Always depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal while in this range.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range for extended periods of time. The engine may be
started in this range.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
DRIVE
For most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement
or in mud and snow. Begins at a stop in low gear with
automatic upshift to 2nd gear. Will not shift to 3rd gear.
1 (First)
For hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on
steep grades. Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift.
Provides engine compression braking at low speeds.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled 4th speed (OVERDRIVE). The transmission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in DRIVE
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
• the TOW/HAUL button has not been activated
• the transmission has reached normal operating
temperature
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into OVERDRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until
the transmission cools down. After the transmission cools
down, the transmission will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at
vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift to 3rd gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
NOTE: TOW/HAUL mode locks out Overdrive.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in 2nd gear in any forward driving range.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the
LOCK position.
Tow/Haul Button
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pressed each time the engine is started.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Only 2nd gear range will operate in the DRIVE
position. Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
5–Speed Automatic Transmission (4.0L Engine)
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
PARK
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brake
first, then place the shift lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in REVERSE. You could lose control of
the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only
shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and when your right foot is firmly on the brake
pedal.
REVERSE
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
5
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
DRIVE
The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing the selection
of the desired top gear. For example, if the driver shifts
the transmission into 3rd gear, the transmission will
never shift above 3rd gear, but can shift down to 2nd gear
or 1st gear, when needed.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
D
1-5
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left “D (-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift
to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled 5th gear (OVERDRIVE). The transmission will automatically shift from 4th gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
• the transmission selector is in DRIVE
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature
• the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
• the transmission has reached normal operating
temperature
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into OVERDRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the note under
torque converter clutch later in this section.
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warm up time of
the engine and transmission.
During cold temperature operation, the transmission
may not downshift from 2nd gear to 1st gear after the
initial 1st to 2nd gear upshift.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
5
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the
LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Only 2nd gear range will operate in the DRIVE
position. Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle. It engages at
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The
feature is operational in OVERDRIVE and in DRIVE.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into OVERDRIVE when cold. This
is normal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
• If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
PARK into any other gear position.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides two
mode positions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range (2WD)
and 4–wheel drive high range (4WD LOCK).
5
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
MP 143 Single-Speed Part-Time Transfer Case
Operating Information/Precautions
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the center console.
Transfer Case Switch
The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK position is designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Proper operation of 4–wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Since 4–wheel drive provides improved traction, there is
a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The “4WD” Indicator Light (located in the
display under the tachometer) will flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met. To
retry a shift, return the control knob back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed
if the key is in the ACC position.
• Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or
excessive loading.
NOTE:
• The 4–wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
“4WD” Indicator Light (located in the display under
the tachometer) will flash. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
5
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4L or 4LO (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4L or 4LO for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4L or 4LO range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water, avoid depths in excess of nine inches. The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(50 cm) and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (50 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, axle, transfer
case) to assure they have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud and Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
5
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO. Use
first gear and 4L or 4LO for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer
case to 4L or 4LO range. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a
good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them if required and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush, or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
No chemical flushes should be used in any power
steering system; only the approved lubricant may be
used.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light”
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
Parking Brake
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK. Otherwise, the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING!
• Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
the PARK position. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is subject to
possible detrimental effects of electronic interference
caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or
telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes an Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All five systems
work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions and are commonly referred to
as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section.
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It
can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects
and/or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESPequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has two available operating modes in
2WD, 4WD Part Time, 4WD Full Time, and on 2WD
vehicles.
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD, 4WD
Part Time, 4WD Full Time, and on 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most all driving
situations. ESP should only be turned off for specific
reasons as noted below.
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch (located in the center stack lower switch
bank). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of
ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature described in the
TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESP function normally. This mode is intended to
be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on
again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch. This
will restore the normal “ESP ON” mode of operation.
ESP Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by briefly depressing the
ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with BAS. The “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster both come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or the BAS system. If this lamp remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp⬙ come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage it.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the indicators appear in
two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your
tires. The service description and load identification will
be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “S” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted with
P235/65R17 and P225/75R16 tires.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P235/65R17 and P225/75R16 tires.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in
Section 8 of this manual. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the
“Tires – General Information” in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
• The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F
(-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to
turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise
to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
• The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The
matching full-size spare can be used in place of any of the
four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure
in the full-size spare when it is used in place of a road
tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the lowpressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Vehicles with Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full-size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn
on upon the next ignition key cycle.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Telltale light, as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
NOTE:
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
Telltale light will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Three Trigger modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it will
cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to display in
the EVIC.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Vehicles with Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn
on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC
will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) the TPMS Telltale light will turn OFF,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure
value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value. The
EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message
to remind you to service the flat tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NOTE:
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS Telltale
light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition,
the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing
pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7L Engine
The 3.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality
regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result
in poorer performance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
4.0L Engine
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of
premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing methanol or E85
ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage,
and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
5
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the MIL to turn on.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle
is refueled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBD II” in Section 7.
WARNING!
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight- carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking
performance and could result in an accident.
Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over
2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional trailer tow prep
package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Max GTW (Gross Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
Model
Frontal Area
Transmission
Wt)
3.7L/Automatic
4x2
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.7L/Automatic
4x4
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3.7L/Automatic
4x2
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
w/ Cooler
3.7L/Automatic
4x4
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
w/Cooler
4.0L/Automatic
4x2
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
4.0L/Automatic
4x4
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
4.0L/Automatic
4x2
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
w/ Cooler
4.0L/Automatic
4x4
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
w/ Cooler
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire
and loading information placard. Refer to the Tire Safety
Information section in this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) between 3,500 Lbs (1 588 kg) and 5,000 Lbs
(2 268 kg)
The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine/transmission
combinations, ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch.
Engine/
Transmission
3.7L/Automatic
w/ Cooler
3.7L/Automatic
w/Cooler
4.0L/Automatic
w/ Cooler
4.0L/Automatic
w/ Cooler
Model
Frontal Area
Tongue Wt. (See Note)
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
Max GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
4x2
4x4
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
4x2
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
4x4
64 sq ft (5.94 sq m)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire
and loading information placard. Refer to the Tire Safety
Information section in this manual.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side-toside which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the tire and loading information
placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
5
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
(Continued)
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK.
Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The trailer tow package may include a 4-pin and 7-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
7-Pin Connector
4-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing up the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the TOW/
HAUL button should be selected.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL button (3.7L engine) or
“4” range (4.0L engine) while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule B in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
Towing Tips — TOW/HAUL (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly
areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on
more severe grades. Refer to “Transmission Shifting” in
this section.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put the transmission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− Refer to “Cooling System Operating” information in
the Maintenance section of this manual for more
information.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing — 2WD Models
Recreational towing (all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is
removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing — 4WD or All-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
Recreational towing (all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing is NOT allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ 2-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ 4-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
6
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the
lower switch bank below the climate controls.
To operate the Hazard Warning flasher, press the switch
and all front and rear directional signals will flash
intermittently. Press the switch a second time to turn off
the flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Switch
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
6
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and they can
damage the winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
4. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
WARNING! (Continued)
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. Assemble the tools by connecting the driver to the extension, and then to the lug wrench.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
6
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it in
the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be
changed. For the rear tires, place it under the axle by the
wheel to be changed. Position the jack handle on the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper
locations.
6
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12-Volts.
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above the
freezing point before attempting a jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent.
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion.
• Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
6
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recommended. Attach towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow
must be observed.
NOTE: The transmission must be in NEUTRAL under
any towing configuration.
2-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Front Wheels Raised
The speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).
This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in
NEUTRAL, the ignition key in the LOCK position, the
front wheels raised, and the rear wheels on the ground.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
15 miles (25 km) can cause severe transmission damage.
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed.
Rear Wheels Raised
The speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).
This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in
NEUTRAL, the ignition key in the LOCK position, the
rear wheels raised, and the front wheels on the ground.
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed.
4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends flatbed towing with all
wheels OFF the ground.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . 369
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
7
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Left Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Right Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Front Fog Light (Front Fascia Mounted) . . . . . 405
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . 407
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 396
䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 409
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module
— Battery
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Coolant Pressure Cap
7
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.0L
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Integrated Power Module
— Battery
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Engine Oil Fill
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Coolant Pressure Cap
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
7
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the
gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem persists, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.
If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you will
see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.7L Engine)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (4.0L Engine)
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred. SAE 5W-30 engine oil
is allowed during cold weather only to improve cold
weather starting.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
7
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist (3.7L Only).
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of the manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling the battery.
WARNING!
• Battery acid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in your face or on your skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent/antifreeze (not
radiator antifreeze). Operate the system for a few seconds
to flush out the residual water.
7
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn OFF the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing.
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
• Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Engine Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
7
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
may result in decreased corrosion protection and
engine damage. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
(-37°C) are anticipated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/antifreeze (coolant) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant reserve tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature,
the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine
coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the recovery bottle does not
drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
7
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install only
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result
in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately if
the BRAKE warning light shows system failure.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check — 42RLE (3.7L Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil
fill tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
Fluid Level Check — W5A580 (4.0L Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil
fill tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
7
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in
detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers
should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
CAUTION!
When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid
begins to run out of the hole.
Drain
First remove fill plug (B), then drain plug (C). Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15–25 ft lbs (20–34 N·m).
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
7
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate are kept clear
and open.
7
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials威 products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean, then
MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR威
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean,
a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the seat belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the inside of
the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J1
J2
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Power Folding Seat
Transfer Case/Pwr
Liftgate Module
J8
J9
J10
40 Amp
Green
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Rear Door Module (RR
DOOR NODE)
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/ESP
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/ESP
Power Memory Seat (If
Equipped)
PZEV Motor/Flex Fuel
Hdlp Wash Relay/
Manual Tuning Valve
7
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J11
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Sway Bar/
THATCHAM LockUnlock/Power Sliding
Door Module
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Main
EBL (Rear Window
Defogger)
Rear Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Trans
Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J21
J22
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
Front/Rear Washer
Sunroof Module
M1
15 Amp
Blue
M2
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
Description
Center High Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
Trailer Lighting
Frt/Rear Axle Lockers
Trailer Tow
Inverter
Power Outlet #1/Rain
Sensor
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SELECT)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M8
M9
M10
MiniFuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seat
M11
10 Amp
Red
M12
30 Amp
Green
Rear Heated Seat (If
Equipped)
Ignition Off Draw —
Vehicle Entertainment
System (IOD-VES), Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD,
Hands-Free Module
(HFM), RADIO, Antenna (ANT), Universal
Garage Door Opener
(UGDO), Vanity Lamp
(VANITY LP)
(Ignition Off Draw)
IOD-HVAC/ATC, MW
SENSR, Underhood
Lamp (UH LMP)
Amplifier (AMP)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
M13
20 Amp
Yellow
M14
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Ignition Off Draw—
Cabin Compartment
Node (IOD-CCN),
Wireless Control Module (WCM), SIREN,
Clock Module (CLK
MOD), Multifunction
Control Switch (MULTIFCTN SW)
Trailer Tow (Export
Only)
7
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M15
M16
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
COL MOD, IR SNS,
Heater Ventilation, Air
Conditioning/
Automatic Temperature Control (HVAC/
ATC), Rearview Mirror
(RR VW MIR), Cabin
Compartment Node
(CCN), Transfer Case
Switch (T-CASE SW),
RUN/ST, Multifunction Control Switch
(MULTIFTCN SW),
Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM), Glow Plug
Module (GLW PLG
MOD) — Export Diesel
Only
Occupant Restraint
Controller/Occupant
Classification Module
(ORC/OCM)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
M17
15 Amp
Blue
M18
15 Amp
Blue
M19
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
M20
M21
M22
M23
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Left Tail/License/Park
Lamp (LT-TAIL/LIC/
PRK LMP)
Right Tail/Park/Run
Lamp (RT-TAIL/PRK/
RUN LMP)
Auto Shut Down (ASD
#1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment
Node Interior Light
(CCN INT LIGHT),
Switch Bank (SW
BANK), Steering Control Module (SCM)
Auto Shut Down (ASD
#3)
Right Horn (RT HORN
(HI/LOW)
Left Horn (LT HORN
(HI/LOW)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M24
M25
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
M26
10 Amp
Red
M27
10 Amp
Red
M28
10 Amp
Red
M29
10 Amp
Red
Description
Rear Wiper (REAR
WIPER)
Fuel Pump (FUEL
PUMP), Diesel Lift
Pump (DSL LIFT
PUMP) — Export Only
Power Mirror Switch
(PWR MIRR SW),
Driver Window Switch
(DRVR WIND SW)
Ignition Switch (IGN
SW), Window Module
(WIN MOD)
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Transmission Feed (TRANS
FEED), J1962
Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
M30
15 Amp
Blue
M31
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
M32
M33
10 Amp
Red
M34
10 Amp
Red
Description
Rear Wiper Module
(RR WIPER MOD),
Power Folding Mirror
(PWR FOLD MIR)
Back-Up Lamps (B/U
LAMPS)
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), TT
EUROPE
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Global
Powertrain Engine
Controller (GPEC)
Park Assist (PRK
ASST), Heater Ventilation, Air Conditioning
Module (HVAC MOD),
Headlamp Wash
(HDLP WASH), Compass (COMPAS)
7
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M35
M36
M37
M38
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet #3
(BATT)
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP), Stop Lamp
Switch (STP LP SW),
Fuel Pump Rly Hi
Control
Lock/Unlock Motors
(LOCK/UNLOCK
MTRS)
CAUTION!
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb No.
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TL212–2
Liftgate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLW214–2A
Reading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb No.
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9008 H13
Front Park/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H10 9145
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlight unit in the engine compartment to access the headlight bulb lock ring.
3. Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlight
unit housing.
4. Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlight
housing counterclockwise to unlock it.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
Left Front Turn Signal
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right (full
right lock).
2. Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting
counter clockwise. Access to the bulb can be gained
through the wheel liner hole.
Access Door
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Right Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlight unit in the engine compartment to access the turn signal bulb.
3. Twist the bulb counterclockwise to remove.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
Front Side Marker
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the grille assembly as follows:
a. Remove eight fasteners.
b. Remove two screws from each headlight.
c. Remove two rivets from the center of the grille.
d. Remove one push pin from the top of each fender.
e. Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect
the grille clips to the fender and the headlight ballstuds
to the front end module.
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove.
Front Fog Light (Front Fascia Mounted)
1. Reach between the front fascia and wheel liner from
under the vehicle.
2. Turn the front fog light bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
7
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Backup Lights
1. Open the lift gate.
2. Remove the two push pins.
Push Pins
3. Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical connection.
4. Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the bulb from the backplate.
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose (if
equipped) from the CHMSL.
3. Replace the CHMSL.
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
7
Screw Locations
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.0 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
4.0 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19.5 Gallons
Metric
73.8 Liters
5 Quarts
5.5 Quarts
4.7 Liters
5.2 Liters
14 Quarts
13.3 Liters
14 Quarts
13.3 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (3.7L Engine)
Engine Oil (4.0L Engine)
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine)
Spark Plugs (4.0L Engine)
Fuel Selection (3.7L Engine)
Fuel Selection (4.0L Engine)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent
ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable, 89 Octane Preferred
7
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
SAE 80W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 412
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 414
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 M
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use Factory
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At Each Stop for Fuel
N
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a C
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level E
Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or under
“Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster
Descriptions section of this manual.
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the S
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when C
H
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if D
U
required.
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 M
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
T 18 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or
24 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 M
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or
48 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
T 54 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 M
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
T 78 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 M
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
96 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
T 102 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Replace the spark plugs (4.0L Engine).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏ Replace the timing belt (4.0L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant.
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 M
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
T 132 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425 M
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 432
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 430
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
9
428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
9
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when
you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also
made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership
experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
9
432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
9
434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
438 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 376
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,251
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,77,181
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,288
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,270,389
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,410
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,274
INDEX 439
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
272
154
154
410
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,288
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . .
Break-In Recommendations, New
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Vehicle . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,196
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,330
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
10
440 INDEX
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Cargo Slide Out System
Load N Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,370
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,77
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66,71,73
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,71
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,216,220,229
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,190,195
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,196
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,197
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
INDEX 441
Selection of Coolant
Corrosion Protection
Cupholders . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance
(Antifreeze)
.........
.........
.........
. . . . . . 383,408,409
. . . . . . . . . . . . 392
. . . . . . . . . . . . 158
. . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,250
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
144
277
278
278
245
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 154
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 135
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 176,292
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 191
10
442 INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 370,412
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,368
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,330
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,408
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,408,409
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 61
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,330
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,395
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,409
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
INDEX 443
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,404,405,406
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 409
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,405
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,327,409
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,333,370
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
10
444 INDEX
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,271
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,115,326
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,337
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,336
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect威)
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Key Removal . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . .
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
403
130
403
130
124
262
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
341
159
158
144
127
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
12
12
19
14
INDEX 445
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,174
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,358
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
14
13
19
12
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,71
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,129
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,181
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,176
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10
446 INDEX
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,292
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,180,405
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,174
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,175
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 186
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 186
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 182,316
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,404,405,406
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 174
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
INDEX 447
Load N Go
Sliding Cargo Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,71
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
. . . . . 377
. . . . . 373
. . . . . 412
. . . . . 153
. . 186,370
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,194
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,432
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10
448 INDEX
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,327
Odometer
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,409
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,409
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,408
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375,408
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,370
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,267,273
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,273
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,355
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,433
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 301
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
INDEX 449
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,283
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . .
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) .
Rear Park Sense System
Rear Window Defroster
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
308
240
391
137
166
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 246
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
10
450 INDEX
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 43
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,73
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,396
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
INDEX 451
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,216,220,229
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,270
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,176,404,405,406
Sliding Cargo Floor
Load N Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,309,356
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,283
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10
452 INDEX
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 48
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 301
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,305,435
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,296
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,274
INDEX 453
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,289
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,270
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,270
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 144
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,176,404,405,406
UConnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10
454 INDEX
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,197
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,334
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,153
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,379
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 394
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler LLC
81-326-0913
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.